linux/include/net/mac80211.h
<<
>>
Prefs
   1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
   2/*
   3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
   4 *
   5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
   6 * Copyright 2006-2007  Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
   7 * Copyright 2007-2010  Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
   8 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
   9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
  10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
  11 */
  12
  13#ifndef MAC80211_H
  14#define MAC80211_H
  15
  16#include <linux/bug.h>
  17#include <linux/kernel.h>
  18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
  19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
  20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
  21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
  22#include <net/codel.h>
  23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
  24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
  25
  26/**
  27 * DOC: Introduction
  28 *
  29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
  30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
  31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
  32 * drivers.
  33 */
  34
  35/**
  36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
  37 *
  38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
  39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
  40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
  41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
  42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
  43 * tasklet function.
  44 *
  45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
  46 *       use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
  47 */
  48
  49/**
  50 * DOC: Warning
  51 *
  52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
  53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
  54 */
  55
  56/**
  57 * DOC: Frame format
  58 *
  59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
  60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
  61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
  62 * hardware.
  63 *
  64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
  65 *
  66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
  67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
  68 *
  69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
  70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
  71 */
  72
  73/**
  74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
  75 *
  76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
  77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
  78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
  79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
  80 *
  81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
  82 * suspend.
  83 *
  84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
  85 *
  86 */
  87
  88/**
  89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
  90 *
  91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
  92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
  93 * between different stations/interfaces.
  94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
  95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
  96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
  97 *
  98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
  99 * driver operation.
 100 *
 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
 104 *
 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 107 *
 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 111 *
 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
 117 *
 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 122 * .release_buffered_frames().
 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 126 */
 127
 128struct device;
 129
 130/**
 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 132 *
 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
 135 */
 136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
 137        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =          16,
 138        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =       BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
 139};
 140
 141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE        0xff
 142
 143/**
 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 149 */
 150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
 151        IEEE80211_AC_VO         = 0,
 152        IEEE80211_AC_VI         = 1,
 153        IEEE80211_AC_BE         = 2,
 154        IEEE80211_AC_BK         = 3,
 155};
 156
 157/**
 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 159 *
 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
 162 *
 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 165 *      2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
 172 */
 173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
 174        u16 txop;
 175        u16 cw_min;
 176        u16 cw_max;
 177        u8 aifs;
 178        bool acm;
 179        bool uapsd;
 180        bool mu_edca;
 181        struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
 182};
 183
 184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
 185        unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
 186        unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
 187        unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
 188        unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
 189};
 190
 191/**
 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 197 *      this is used only with channel switching with CSA
 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
 199 */
 200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
 201        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH          = BIT(0),
 202        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS      = BIT(1),
 203        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR          = BIT(2),
 204        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL        = BIT(3),
 205        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH      = BIT(4),
 206};
 207
 208/**
 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 210 *
 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 213 *
 214 * @def: the channel definition
 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 217 *      active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 219 *      after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
 220 *      this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 223 *      sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 224 */
 225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
 226        struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
 227        struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
 228
 229        u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
 230
 231        bool radar_enabled;
 232
 233        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
 234};
 235
 236/**
 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 239 *      exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 240 *      needs to be switched from one to the other.
 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 242 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 243 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 244 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 245 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 246 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 247 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 248 *      for changes/removal.)
 249 */
 250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
 251        CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
 252        CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
 253};
 254
 255/**
 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 257 *
 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 261 * done.
 262 *
 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 266 */
 267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
 268        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
 269        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
 270        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
 271};
 272
 273/**
 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 275 *
 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 278 *
 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 280 *      also implies a change in the AID.
 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 288 *      reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 290 *      new beacon (beaconing modes)
 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 292 *      enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 297 *      that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
 304 *      changed
 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 306 *      currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 308 *      note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 309 *      context had been assigned.
 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 313 *      keep alive) changed.
 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
 316 *      functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
 319 *
 320 */
 321enum ieee80211_bss_change {
 322        BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC               = 1<<0,
 323        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT        = 1<<1,
 324        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE        = 1<<2,
 325        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT            = 1<<3,
 326        BSS_CHANGED_HT                  = 1<<4,
 327        BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES         = 1<<5,
 328        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT          = 1<<6,
 329        BSS_CHANGED_BSSID               = 1<<7,
 330        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON              = 1<<8,
 331        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED      = 1<<9,
 332        BSS_CHANGED_CQM                 = 1<<10,
 333        BSS_CHANGED_IBSS                = 1<<11,
 334        BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER          = 1<<12,
 335        BSS_CHANGED_QOS                 = 1<<13,
 336        BSS_CHANGED_IDLE                = 1<<14,
 337        BSS_CHANGED_SSID                = 1<<15,
 338        BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP       = 1<<16,
 339        BSS_CHANGED_PS                  = 1<<17,
 340        BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER             = 1<<18,
 341        BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS              = 1<<19,
 342        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO         = 1<<20,
 343        BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH           = 1<<21,
 344        BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
 345        BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS           = 1<<23,
 346        BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE          = 1<<24,
 347        BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE          = 1<<25,
 348        BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER       = 1<<26,
 349        BSS_CHANGED_TWT                 = 1<<27,
 350        BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD          = 1<<28,
 351
 352        /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
 353};
 354
 355/*
 356 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 357 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 358 * filtering will be disabled.
 359 */
 360#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
 361
 362/**
 363 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 364 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
 365 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
 366 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
 367 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 368 *      they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 369 *      once each time the timeout triggers.
 370 */
 371enum ieee80211_event_type {
 372        RSSI_EVENT,
 373        MLME_EVENT,
 374        BAR_RX_EVENT,
 375        BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
 376};
 377
 378/**
 379 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 380 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 381 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 382 */
 383enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
 384        RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
 385        RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
 386};
 387
 388/**
 389 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
 390 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 391 */
 392struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
 393        enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
 394};
 395
 396/**
 397 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 398 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
 399 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
 400 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 401 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
 402 */
 403enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
 404        AUTH_EVENT,
 405        ASSOC_EVENT,
 406        DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
 407        DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
 408};
 409
 410/**
 411 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 412 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 413 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 414 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 415 */
 416enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
 417        MLME_SUCCESS,
 418        MLME_DENIED,
 419        MLME_TIMEOUT,
 420};
 421
 422/**
 423 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
 424 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 425 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 426 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 427 */
 428struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
 429        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
 430        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
 431        u16 reason;
 432};
 433
 434/**
 435 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 436 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 437 * @tid: the tid
 438 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
 439 */
 440struct ieee80211_ba_event {
 441        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
 442        u16 tid;
 443        u16 ssn;
 444};
 445
 446/**
 447 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
 448 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
 449 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
 450 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
 451 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
 452 * @u:union holding the fields above
 453 */
 454struct ieee80211_event {
 455        enum ieee80211_event_type type;
 456        union {
 457                struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
 458                struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
 459                struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
 460        } u;
 461};
 462
 463/**
 464 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 465 *
 466 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 467 *
 468 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 469 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 470 */
 471struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
 472        u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
 473        u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
 474};
 475
 476/**
 477 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
 478 *
 479 * @lci: LCI subelement content
 480 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 481 * @lci_len: LCI data length
 482 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 483 */
 484struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
 485        const u8 *lci;
 486        const u8 *civicloc;
 487        size_t lci_len;
 488        size_t civicloc_len;
 489};
 490
 491/**
 492 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 493 *
 494 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 495 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 496 *
 497 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
 498 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 499 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 500 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 501 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 502 *      ACK, BACK or both
 503 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 504 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 505 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
 506 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 507 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 508 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 509 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 510 * @assoc: association status
 511 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 512 *      or not
 513 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
 514 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 515 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
 516 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 517 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
 518 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
 519 *      valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
 520 *      with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
 521 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
 522 *      as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 523 *      HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 524 *      only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 525 *      association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
 526 *      %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 527 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 528 *      the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
 529 *      (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 530 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 531 *      is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
 532 *      IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 533 *      by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 534 *      guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
 535 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
 536 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
 537 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 538 *      index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 539 *      the current band.
 540 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
 541 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
 542 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 543 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
 544 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 545 *      configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
 546 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
 547 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
 548 *      This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 549 *      Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 550 *      be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
 551 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
 552 *      implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 553 *      cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 554 *      relation to the newly configured threshold.
 555 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 556 *      implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 557 *      threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 558 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
 559 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
 560 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 561 *      may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 562 *      The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 563 *      to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
 564 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 565 *      may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 566 *      array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
 567 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
 568 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 569 *      hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 570 *      your driver/device needs to do.
 571 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 572 *      offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
 573 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
 574 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 575 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
 576 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
 577 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 578 *      Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 579 *      TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 580 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 581 *      userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 582 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
 583 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
 584 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 585 *      to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 586 *      if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
 587 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 588 *      transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 589 *      In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 590 *      a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 591 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 592 *      protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 593 *      station.
 594 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 595 *      responder functionality.
 596 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
 597 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 598 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 599 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 600 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 601 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 602 *      nontransmitted BSSIDs
 603 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 604 *      in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
 605 * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
 606 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
 607 */
 608struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
 609        const u8 *bssid;
 610        u8 bss_color;
 611        u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
 612        bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
 613        bool uora_exists;
 614        bool ack_enabled;
 615        u8 uora_ocw_range;
 616        u16 frame_time_rts_th;
 617        bool he_support;
 618        bool twt_requester;
 619        bool twt_responder;
 620        /* association related data */
 621        bool assoc, ibss_joined;
 622        bool ibss_creator;
 623        u16 aid;
 624        /* erp related data */
 625        bool use_cts_prot;
 626        bool use_short_preamble;
 627        bool use_short_slot;
 628        bool enable_beacon;
 629        u8 dtim_period;
 630        u16 beacon_int;
 631        u16 assoc_capability;
 632        u64 sync_tsf;
 633        u32 sync_device_ts;
 634        u8 sync_dtim_count;
 635        u32 basic_rates;
 636        struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
 637        int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
 638        u16 ht_operation_mode;
 639        s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
 640        u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
 641        s32 cqm_rssi_low;
 642        s32 cqm_rssi_high;
 643        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
 644        struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
 645        __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
 646        int arp_addr_cnt;
 647        bool qos;
 648        bool idle;
 649        bool ps;
 650        u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
 651        size_t ssid_len;
 652        bool hidden_ssid;
 653        int txpower;
 654        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
 655        struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
 656        bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
 657        u16 max_idle_period;
 658        bool protected_keep_alive;
 659        bool ftm_responder;
 660        struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
 661        /* Multiple BSSID data */
 662        bool nontransmitted;
 663        u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
 664        u8 bssid_index;
 665        u8 bssid_indicator;
 666        bool ema_ap;
 667        u8 profile_periodicity;
 668        struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
 669        struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
 670};
 671
 672/**
 673 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
 674 *
 675 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
 676 *
 677 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
 678 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 679 *      number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 680 *      number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 681 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 682 *      assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 683 *      for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 684 *      that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 685 *      If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 686 *      assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 687 *      802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 688 *      beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
 689 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 690 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 691 *      station
 692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 693 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
 695 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
 696 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
 697 *      because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 698 *      avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 699 *      firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 700 *      went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 701 *      the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 702 *      that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 703 *      since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 704 *      hardware queue.
 705 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 706 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 707 *      is for the whole aggregation.
 708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 709 *      so consider using block ack request (BAR).
 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 711 *      set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 712 *      be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
 713 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 714 *      that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 715 *      off-channel operation.
 716 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 717 *      used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 718 *      it can be sent out.
 719 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 720 *      used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 722 *      used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 724 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 725 *      be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
 726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 727 *      transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 728 *      by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 729 *      queue gets full.
 730 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 731 *      after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 732 *      be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
 733 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 734 *      code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 735 *      should kick the MLME state machine.
 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 737 *      MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 738 *      status to user space)
 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
 740 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 741 *      frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
 742 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 743 *      the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 744 *      in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 745 *      handled properly by the device.
 746 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 747 *      testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 748 *      TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 750 *      This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 751 *      frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 753 *      when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 754 *      an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
 755 *      the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 756 *      PS-Poll responses.
 757 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 758 *      This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 759 *      the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
 760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 761 *      would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 762 *      monitor injection).
 763 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 764 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 765 *      any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 766 *      This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 767 *      behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
 768 *
 769 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 770 *       forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
 771 */
 772enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
 773        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS          = BIT(0),
 774        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ             = BIT(1),
 775        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK                 = BIT(2),
 776        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT          = BIT(3),
 777        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT         = BIT(4),
 778        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM        = BIT(5),
 779        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU                  = BIT(6),
 780        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED               = BIT(7),
 781        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED           = BIT(8),
 782        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK                   = BIT(9),
 783        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU                 = BIT(10),
 784        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK         = BIT(11),
 785        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE        = BIT(12),
 786        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK        = BIT(13),
 787        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING    = BIT(14),
 788        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED              = BIT(15),
 789        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT         = BIT(16),
 790        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER           = BIT(17),
 791        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES            = BIT(18),
 792        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION       = BIT(19),
 793        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX         = BIT(20),
 794        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX     = BIT(21),
 795        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC                   = BIT(22),
 796        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC                   = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
 797        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN             = BIT(25),
 798        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE     = BIT(26),
 799        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE            = BIT(27),
 800        IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP                = BIT(28),
 801        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE            = BIT(29),
 802        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG               = BIT(30),
 803        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED     = BIT(31),
 804};
 805
 806#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT             23
 807
 808/**
 809 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 810 *
 811 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 812 *      protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
 813 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 814 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
 816 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
 818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
 819 *
 820 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 821 */
 822enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
 823        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO       = BIT(0),
 824        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE           = BIT(1),
 825        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT           = BIT(2),
 826        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU                 = BIT(3),
 827        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT             = BIT(4),
 828        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP     = BIT(5),
 829};
 830
 831/*
 832 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 833 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 834 */
 835#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |               \
 836        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
 837        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |           \
 838        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |               \
 839        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |           \
 840        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
 841        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |                \
 842        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 843
 844/**
 845 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 846 *      Rate Control algorithm.
 847 *
 848 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 849 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 850 *
 851 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 853 *      This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
 856 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 857 *      into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 859 *      Greenfield mode.
 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 862 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 863 *      (80+80 isn't supported yet)
 864 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 865 *      adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 866 *      NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 867 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 868 */
 869enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
 870        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS             = BIT(0),
 871        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT         = BIT(1),
 872        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE      = BIT(2),
 873
 874        /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
 875        IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS                     = BIT(3),
 876        IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD             = BIT(4),
 877        IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(5),
 878        IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA                = BIT(6),
 879        IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI                = BIT(7),
 880        IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS                 = BIT(8),
 881        IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(9),
 882        IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH           = BIT(10),
 883};
 884
 885
 886/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
 887#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
 888
 889/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
 890#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
 891
 892/* maximum number of rate stages */
 893#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES  4
 894
 895/* maximum number of rate table entries */
 896#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE    4
 897
 898/**
 899 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
 900 *
 901 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 902 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
 903 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
 904 *
 905 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 906 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 907 *
 908 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 909 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
 910 *
 911 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 912 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 913 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 914 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
 915 * information::
 916 *
 917 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
 918 *
 919 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 920 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 921 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 922 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
 923 * information should then contain::
 924 *
 925 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
 926 *
 927 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 928 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
 929 */
 930struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
 931        s8 idx;
 932        u16 count:5,
 933            flags:11;
 934} __packed;
 935
 936#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY          31
 937
 938static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
 939                                          u8 mcs, u8 nss)
 940{
 941        WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
 942        WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
 943        rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
 944}
 945
 946static inline u8
 947ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 948{
 949        return rate->idx & 0xF;
 950}
 951
 952static inline u8
 953ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 954{
 955        return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
 956}
 957
 958/**
 959 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
 960 *
 961 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
 962 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
 963 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
 964 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
 965 *
 966 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
 967 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
 968 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
 969 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
 970 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
 971 * @control: union part for control data
 972 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
 973 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
 974 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
 975 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
 976 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
 977 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
 978 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
 979 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
 980 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
 981 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
 982 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
 983 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
 984 * @pad: padding
 985 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
 986 * @status: union part for status data
 987 * @status.rates: attempted rates
 988 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
 989 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
 990 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
 991 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
 992 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
 993 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
 994 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
 995 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
 996 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
 997 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
 998 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
 999 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1000 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1001 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1002 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1003 */
1004struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1005        /* common information */
1006        u32 flags;
1007        u32 band:3,
1008            ack_frame_id:13,
1009            hw_queue:4,
1010            tx_time_est:10;
1011        /* 2 free bits */
1012
1013        union {
1014                struct {
1015                        union {
1016                                /* rate control */
1017                                struct {
1018                                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1019                                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1020                                        s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1021                                        u8 use_rts:1;
1022                                        u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1023                                        u8 short_preamble:1;
1024                                        u8 skip_table:1;
1025                                        /* 2 bytes free */
1026                                };
1027                                /* only needed before rate control */
1028                                unsigned long jiffies;
1029                        };
1030                        /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1031                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1032                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1033                        u32 flags;
1034                        codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1035                } control;
1036                struct {
1037                        u64 cookie;
1038                } ack;
1039                struct {
1040                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1041                        s32 ack_signal;
1042                        u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1043                        u8 ampdu_len;
1044                        u8 antenna;
1045                        u16 tx_time;
1046                        bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1047                        void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1048                } status;
1049                struct {
1050                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1051                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1052                        u8 pad[4];
1053
1054                        void *rate_driver_data[
1055                                IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1056                };
1057                void *driver_data[
1058                        IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1059        };
1060};
1061
1062static inline u16
1063ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1064{
1065        /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1066         * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1067         */
1068        info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1069        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1070}
1071
1072static inline u16
1073ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1074{
1075        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1076}
1077
1078/**
1079 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1080 *
1081 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1082 * @info: Basic tx status information
1083 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1084 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1085 */
1086struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1087        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1088        struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1089        struct sk_buff *skb;
1090        struct rate_info *rate;
1091};
1092
1093/**
1094 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1095 *
1096 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1097 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1098 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1099 *
1100 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1101 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1102 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1103 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1104 */
1105struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1106        const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1107        size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1108        const u8 *common_ies;
1109        size_t common_ie_len;
1110};
1111
1112
1113static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1114{
1115        return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1116}
1117
1118static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1119{
1120        return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1121}
1122
1123/**
1124 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1125 *
1126 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1127 *
1128 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1129 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1130 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1131 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1132 *
1133 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1134 *       info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1135 *       instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1136 */
1137static inline void
1138ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1139{
1140        int i;
1141
1142        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1143                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1144        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1145                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1146        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1147        /* clear the rate counts */
1148        for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1149                info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1150
1151        BUILD_BUG_ON(
1152            offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1153        memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1154               sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1155               offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1156}
1157
1158
1159/**
1160 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1161 *
1162 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1163 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1164 *      Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1165 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1166 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1167 *      verification has been done by the hardware.
1168 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1169 *      If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1170 *      hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1171 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1172 *      flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1173 *      Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1174 *      is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1175 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1176 *      de-duplication by itself.
1177 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1178 *      the frame.
1179 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1180 *      the frame.
1181 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1182 *      field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1183 *      was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1184 *      merging.
1185 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1186 *      field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1187 *      (including FCS) was received.
1188 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189 *      field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1190 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1191 *      Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1192 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1193 *      number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1194 *      each A-MPDU
1195 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1196 *      subframes of a single A-MPDU
1197 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1198 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1199 *      on this subframe
1200 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1201 *      is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1202 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1203 *      done by the hardware
1204 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1205 *      processing it in any regular way.
1206 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1207 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1208 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1209 *      monitor interfaces.
1210 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1211 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1212 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1213 *      subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1214 *      All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1215 *      if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1216 *      the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1217 *      deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1218 *      subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1219 *      either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1220 *      interleaved with other frames.
1221 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1222 *      radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1223 *      the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1225 *      This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1226 *      the first subframe.
1227 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1228 *      be done in the hardware.
1229 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1230 *      frame
1231 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1232 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1233 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1234 *      
1235 *       - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1236 *       - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1237 *       - DATA3_CODING
1238 *       - DATA5_GI
1239 *       - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1240 *       - DATA6_NSTS
1241 *       - DATA3_STBC
1242 *      
1243 *      from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1244 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1245 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1246 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1247 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1248 *      the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1249 *      in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1250 *      known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1251 */
1252enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1253        RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR              = BIT(0),
1254        RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED               = BIT(1),
1255        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START      = BIT(2),
1256        RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED           = BIT(3),
1257        RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED             = BIT(4),
1258        RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC          = BIT(5),
1259        RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC         = BIT(6),
1260        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START           = BIT(7),
1261        RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL           = BIT(8),
1262        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS           = BIT(9),
1263        RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED            = BIT(10),
1264        RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED           = BIT(11),
1265        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN        = BIT(12),
1266        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST           = BIT(13),
1267        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR   = BIT(14),
1268        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN   = BIT(15),
1269        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END             = BIT(16),
1270        RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR            = BIT(17),
1271        RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR            = BIT(18),
1272        RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE              = BIT(19),
1273        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA    = BIT(20),
1274        RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED            = BIT(21),
1275        RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN           = BIT(22),
1276        RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED            = BIT(23),
1277        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT           = BIT(24),
1278        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN     = BIT(25),
1279        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE             = BIT(26),
1280        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU          = BIT(27),
1281        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG           = BIT(28),
1282        RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU                 = BIT(29),
1283};
1284
1285/**
1286 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1287 *
1288 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1289 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1290 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1291 *      if the driver fills this value it should add
1292 *      %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1293 *      to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1294 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1295 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1296 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1297 */
1298enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1299        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE            = BIT(0),
1300        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI            = BIT(2),
1301        RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF               = BIT(3),
1302        RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK           = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1303        RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC                = BIT(6),
1304        RX_ENC_FLAG_BF                  = BIT(7),
1305};
1306
1307#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT          4
1308
1309enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1310        RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1311        RX_ENC_HT,
1312        RX_ENC_VHT,
1313        RX_ENC_HE,
1314};
1315
1316/**
1317 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1318 *
1319 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1320 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1321 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1322 *
1323 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1324 *      (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1325 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1326 *      needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1327 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1328 *      it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1329 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1330 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1331 *      This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1332 *      for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1333 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1334 *      unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1335 *      @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1336 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1337 *      values were filled.
1338 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1339 *      support dB or unspecified units)
1340 * @antenna: antenna used
1341 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1342 *      HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1343 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1344 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1345 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1346 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1347 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1348 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1349 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1350 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1351 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1352 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1353 *      each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1354 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1355 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1356 */
1357struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1358        u64 mactime;
1359        u64 boottime_ns;
1360        u32 device_timestamp;
1361        u32 ampdu_reference;
1362        u32 flag;
1363        u16 freq;
1364        u8 enc_flags;
1365        u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1366        u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1367        u8 rate_idx;
1368        u8 nss;
1369        u8 rx_flags;
1370        u8 band;
1371        u8 antenna;
1372        s8 signal;
1373        u8 chains;
1374        s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1375        u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1376        u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1377};
1378
1379/**
1380 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1381 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1382 *      (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1383 *       bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1384 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1385 *      alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1386 *      description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1387 *      Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1388 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1389 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1390 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1391 *      then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1392 *      @data field.
1393 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1394 *      the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1395 *      length
1396 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1397 *
1398 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1399 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1400 * data.
1401 */
1402struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1403        u32 present;
1404        u8 align;
1405        u8 oui[3];
1406        u8 subns;
1407        u8 pad;
1408        u16 len;
1409        u8 data[];
1410} __packed;
1411
1412/**
1413 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1414 *
1415 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1416 *
1417 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1418 *      to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1419 *      or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1420 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1421 *      This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1422 *      meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1423 *      transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1424 *      Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1425 *      driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1426 *      for more.
1427 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1428 *      the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1429 *      may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1430 *      be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1431 *      it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1432 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1433 *      operating channel.
1434 */
1435enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1436        IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR          = (1<<0),
1437        IEEE80211_CONF_PS               = (1<<1),
1438        IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE             = (1<<2),
1439        IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL       = (1<<3),
1440};
1441
1442
1443/**
1444 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1445 *
1446 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1447 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1448 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1449 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1450 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1451 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1452 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1453 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1454 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1455 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1456 */
1457enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1458        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS              = BIT(1),
1459        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL   = BIT(2),
1460        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR           = BIT(3),
1461        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS                = BIT(4),
1462        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER             = BIT(5),
1463        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL           = BIT(6),
1464        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS      = BIT(7),
1465        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE              = BIT(8),
1466};
1467
1468/**
1469 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1470 *
1471 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1472 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1473 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1474 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1475 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1476 */
1477enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1478        IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1479        IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1480        IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1481        IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1482
1483        /* keep last */
1484        IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1485};
1486
1487/**
1488 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1489 *
1490 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1491 *
1492 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1493 *
1494 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1495 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1496 *      in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1497 *      has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1498 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1499 *      powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1500 *      the CONF_PS flag is set.
1501 *
1502 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1503 *      value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1504 *
1505 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1506 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1507 *
1508 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1509 *      (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1510 *      but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1511 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1512 *      frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1513 *      number of transmissions not the number of retries
1514 *
1515 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1516 *      %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1517 *      configured for an HT channel.
1518 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1519 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1520 */
1521struct ieee80211_conf {
1522        u32 flags;
1523        int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1524
1525        u16 listen_interval;
1526        u8 ps_dtim_period;
1527
1528        u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1529
1530        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1531        bool radar_enabled;
1532        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1533};
1534
1535/**
1536 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1537 *
1538 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1539 * operation.
1540 *
1541 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1542 *      Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1543 *      announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1544 *      the driver passed into mac80211.
1545 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1546 *      rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1547 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1548 *      scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1549 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1550 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1551 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1552  *     current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1553  *     channel, expressed in TU.
1554 */
1555struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1556        u64 timestamp;
1557        u32 device_timestamp;
1558        bool block_tx;
1559        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1560        u8 count;
1561        u32 delay;
1562};
1563
1564/**
1565 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1566 *
1567 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1568 *      on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1569 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1570 *      monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1571 *      connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1572 *      provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1573 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1574 *      interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1575 *      but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1576 *      only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1577 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1578 *      and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1579 *      this is not pure P2P vif.
1580 */
1581enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1582        IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER             = BIT(0),
1583        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI         = BIT(1),
1584        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD            = BIT(2),
1585        IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE            = BIT(3),
1586};
1587
1588/**
1589 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1590 *
1591 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1592 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1593 *
1594 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1595 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1596 *      or the BSS we're associated to
1597 * @addr: address of this interface
1598 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1599 *      interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1600 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1601 *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1602 *      for read access.
1603 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1604 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1605 *      these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1606 *      or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1607 *      at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1608 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1609 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1610 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1611 *      when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1612 *      path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1613 *      be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1614 *      processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1615 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1616 *      interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1617 *      monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1618 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1619 *      interface.
1620 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1621 *      sizeof(void \*).
1622 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1623 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1624 *      protected by fq->lock.
1625 */
1626struct ieee80211_vif {
1627        enum nl80211_iftype type;
1628        struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1629        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1630        bool p2p;
1631        bool csa_active;
1632        bool mu_mimo_owner;
1633
1634        u8 cab_queue;
1635        u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1636
1637        struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1638
1639        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1640
1641        u32 driver_flags;
1642
1643#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1644        struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1645#endif
1646
1647        unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1648
1649        bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1650
1651        /* must be last */
1652        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1653};
1654
1655static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1656{
1657#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1658        return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1659#endif
1660        return false;
1661}
1662
1663/**
1664 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1665 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1666 *
1667 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1668 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1669 *
1670 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1671 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1672 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1673 */
1674struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1675
1676/**
1677 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1678 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1679 *
1680 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1681 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1682 *
1683 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1684 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1685 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1686 */
1687struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1688
1689/**
1690 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1691 *
1692 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1693 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1694 *
1695 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1696 *      driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1697 *      particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1698 *      will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1699 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1700 *      the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1701 *      generation in software.
1702 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1703 *      that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1704 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1705 *      CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1706 *      (MFP) to be done in software.
1707 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1708 *      if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1709 *      itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1710 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1711 *      not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1712 *      MIC.
1713 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1714 *      management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1715 *      crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1716 *      properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1717 *      fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1718 *      RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1719 *      %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1720 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1721 *      driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1722 *      only for management frames (MFP).
1723 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1724 *      driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1725 *      be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1726 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1727 *      a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1728 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1729 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1730 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1731 *      for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1732 *      generation only
1733 */
1734enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1735        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT     = BIT(0),
1736        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV          = BIT(1),
1737        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC        = BIT(2),
1738        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE             = BIT(3),
1739        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX           = BIT(4),
1740        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE         = BIT(5),
1741        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT              = BIT(6),
1742        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM     = BIT(7),
1743        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE        = BIT(8),
1744        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX           = BIT(9),
1745        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE        = BIT(10),
1746};
1747
1748/**
1749 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1750 *
1751 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1752 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1753 *
1754 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1755 *      wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1756 *      encrypted in hardware.
1757 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1758 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1759 *      needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1760 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1761 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1762 * @keylen: key material length
1763 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1764 *      data block:
1765 *      - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1766 *      - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1767 *      - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1768 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1769 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1770 */
1771struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1772        atomic64_t tx_pn;
1773        u32 cipher;
1774        u8 icv_len;
1775        u8 iv_len;
1776        u8 hw_key_idx;
1777        s8 keyidx;
1778        u16 flags;
1779        u8 keylen;
1780        u8 key[0];
1781};
1782
1783#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN    16
1784
1785#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1786#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1787
1788/**
1789 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1790 *
1791 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1792 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1793 *      reverse order than in packet)
1794 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1795 *      reverse order than in packet)
1796 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1797 *      reverse order than in packet)
1798 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1799 *      reverse order than in packet)
1800 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1801 */
1802struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1803        union {
1804                struct {
1805                        u32 iv32;
1806                        u16 iv16;
1807                } tkip;
1808                struct {
1809                        u8 pn[6];
1810                } ccmp;
1811                struct {
1812                        u8 pn[6];
1813                } aes_cmac;
1814                struct {
1815                        u8 pn[6];
1816                } aes_gmac;
1817                struct {
1818                        u8 pn[6];
1819                } gcmp;
1820                struct {
1821                        u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1822                        u8 seq_len;
1823                } hw;
1824        };
1825};
1826
1827/**
1828 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1829 *
1830 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1831 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1832 *
1833 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1834 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1835 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1836 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1837 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1838 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1839 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1840 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1841 *     key_idx value calculation:
1842 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1843 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1844 */
1845struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1846        u32 cipher;
1847        u16 iftype;
1848        u8 hdr_len;
1849        u8 pn_len;
1850        u8 pn_off;
1851        u8 key_idx_off;
1852        u8 key_idx_mask;
1853        u8 key_idx_shift;
1854        u8 mic_len;
1855};
1856
1857/**
1858 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1859 *
1860 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1861 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1862 *
1863 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1864 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1865 */
1866enum set_key_cmd {
1867        SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1868};
1869
1870/**
1871 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1872 *
1873 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1874 *      this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1875 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1876 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1877 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1878 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1879 */
1880enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1881        /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1882        IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1883        IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1884        IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1885        IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1886        IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1887};
1888
1889/**
1890 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1891 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1892 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1893 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1894 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1895 *      (including 80+80 MHz)
1896 *
1897 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1898 *      correctly, the values must be sorted.
1899 */
1900enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1901        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1902        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1903        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1904        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1905};
1906
1907/**
1908 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1909 *
1910 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1911 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1912 *      Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1913 */
1914struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1915        struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1916        struct {
1917                s8 idx;
1918                u8 count;
1919                u8 count_cts;
1920                u8 count_rts;
1921                u16 flags;
1922        } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1923};
1924
1925/**
1926 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1927 *
1928 * Used to configure txpower for station.
1929 *
1930 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1931 *      to the STA.
1932 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1933 *      will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1934 *      %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1935 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1936 *      per peer TPC.
1937 */
1938struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1939        s16 power;
1940        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1941};
1942
1943/**
1944 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1945 *
1946 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1947 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1948 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1949 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1950 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1951 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1952 *
1953 * @addr: MAC address
1954 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1955 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1956 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1957 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1958 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1959 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1960 *      that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1961 *      Can be modified by driver.
1962 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1963 *      otherwise always false)
1964 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1965 *      sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1966 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1967 *      if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1968 *      IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1969 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1970 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1971 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1972 *      station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1973 *      notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1974 *      the station moves to associated state.
1975 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1976 * @rates: rate control selection table
1977 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1978 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1979 *      valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1980 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1981 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1982 *      A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1983 *      unlimited.
1984 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1985 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1986 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1987 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1988 *      the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1989 */
1990struct ieee80211_sta {
1991        u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1992        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1993        u16 aid;
1994        struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1995        struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1996        struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1997        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1998        bool wme;
1999        u8 uapsd_queues;
2000        u8 max_sp;
2001        u8 rx_nss;
2002        enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2003        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2004        struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2005        bool tdls;
2006        bool tdls_initiator;
2007        bool mfp;
2008        u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2009
2010        /**
2011         * @max_amsdu_len:
2012         * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2013         * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2014         * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2015         *
2016         * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2017         *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2018         * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2019         *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2020         *
2021         * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2022         * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2023         * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2024         */
2025        u16 max_amsdu_len;
2026        bool support_p2p_ps;
2027        u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2028        u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2029        struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2030
2031        struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2032
2033        /* must be last */
2034        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2035};
2036
2037/**
2038 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2039 *
2040 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2041 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2042 *
2043 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2044 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2045 */
2046enum sta_notify_cmd {
2047        STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2048};
2049
2050/**
2051 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2052 *
2053 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2054 *      it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2055 */
2056struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2057        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2058};
2059
2060/**
2061 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2062 *
2063 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2064 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2065 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2066 *      %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2067 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2068 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2069 *
2070 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2071 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2072 */
2073struct ieee80211_txq {
2074        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2075        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2076        u8 tid;
2077        u8 ac;
2078
2079        /* must be last */
2080        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2081};
2082
2083/**
2084 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2085 *
2086 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2087 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2088 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2089 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2090 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2091 *
2092 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2093 *      The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2094 *      controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2095 *      should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2096 *      will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2097 *      algorithm.
2098 *      Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2099 *      callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2100 *      the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2101 *      @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2102 *      timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2103 *      CCK frames.
2104 *
2105 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2106 *      Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2107 *      the FCS at the end.
2108 *
2109 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2110 *      Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2111 *      for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2112 *      rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2113 *      to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2114 *      multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2115 *      the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2116 *
2117 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2118 *      Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2119 *      expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2120 *      If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2121 *
2122 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2123 *      Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2124 *      one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2125 *      between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2126 *
2127 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2128 *      Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2129 *      Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2130 *
2131 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2132 *      Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2133 *
2134 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2135 *      Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2136 *
2137 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2138 *      Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2139 *      stack support for dynamic PS.
2140 *
2141 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2142 *      Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2143 *
2144 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2145 *      Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2146 *
2147 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2148 *      Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2149 *      the stack.
2150 *
2151 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2152 *      The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2153 *      periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2154 *
2155 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2156 *      This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2157 *      dtim_period).
2158 *
2159 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2160 *      per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2161 *      the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2162 *      to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2163 *      possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2164 *      only in that case.
2165 *
2166 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2167 *      autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2168 *      this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2169 *      stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2170 *      Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2171 *      the PS mode of connected stations.
2172 *
2173 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2174 *      setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2175 *      software.
2176 *
2177 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2178 *      a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2179 *      active interfaces.
2180 *
2181 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2182 *      be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2183 *      desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2184 *
2185 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2186 *      crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2187 *      try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2188 *      the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2189 *      supported cipher suites.
2190 *
2191 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2192 *      this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2193 *      for frames.
2194 *
2195 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2196 *      queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2197 *      for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2198 *      control for more details.
2199 *
2200 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2201 *      selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2202 *
2203 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2204 *      P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2205 *      is supported.
2206 *
2207 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2208 *      only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2209 *
2210 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2211 *      and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2212 *      using aggregation for such frames.)
2213 *
2214 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2215 *      for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2216 *      is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2217 *      CSA frame.
2218 *
2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2220 *      or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2221 *
2222 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2223 *      in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2224 *
2225 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2226 *      than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2227 *
2228 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2229 *      within A-MPDU.
2230 *
2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2232 *      for sent beacons.
2233 *
2234 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2235 *      station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2236 *      by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2237 *      from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2238 *
2239 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2240 *      reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2241 *      order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2242 *      timeout.
2243 *
2244 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2245 *      which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2246 *
2247 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2248 *      A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2249 *      When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2250 *      limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2251 *      max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2254 *      skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2255 *
2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2257 *      by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2258 *      drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2259 *      is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2260 *
2261 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2262 *      The stack will not do fragmentation.
2263 *      The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2264 *
2265 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2266 *      TDLS links.
2267 *
2268 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2269 *      mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2270 *      deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2271 *      beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2272 *      virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2273 *      the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2274 *      deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2275 *
2276 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2277 *      support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2278 *
2279 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2280 *      course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2281 *
2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2283 *      extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2284 *      the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2285 *      but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2286 *      See also the documentation for that flag.
2287 *
2288 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2289 *      MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2290 *      TXQs to start with.
2291 *
2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2293 *      length in tx status information
2294 *
2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2296 *
2297 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2298 *      only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2299 *
2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2301 *      aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2302 *      A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2303 *
2304 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2305 */
2306enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2307        IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2308        IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2309        IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2310        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2311        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2312        IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2313        IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2314        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2315        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2316        IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2317        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2318        IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2319        IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2320        IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2321        IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2322        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2323        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2324        IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2325        IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2326        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2327        IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2328        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2329        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2330        IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2331        IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2332        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2333        IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2334        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2335        IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2336        IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2337        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2338        IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2339        IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2340        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2341        IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2342        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2343        IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2344        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2345        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2346        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2347        IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2348        IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2349        IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2350        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2351        IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2352        IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2353        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2354        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2355        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2356
2357        /* keep last, obviously */
2358        NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2359};
2360
2361/**
2362 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2363 *
2364 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2365 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2366 *
2367 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2368 *      802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2369 *      members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2370 *      and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2371 *      bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2372 *
2373 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2374 *
2375 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2376 *      along with this structure.
2377 *
2378 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2379 *
2380 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2381 *      for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2382 *
2383 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2384 *      Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2385 *
2386 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2387 *      only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2388 *
2389 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2390 *      that HW supports
2391 *
2392 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2393 *      data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2394 *      queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2395 *
2396 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2397 *      If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2398 *      set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2399 *
2400 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2401 *      within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2402 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2403 *      within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2404 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2405 *      within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2406 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2407 *      within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2408 *
2409 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2410 *      can handle.
2411 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2412 *      the hw can report back.
2413 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2414 *
2415 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2416 *      sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2417 *      aggregation.
2418 *      This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2419 *      number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2420 *      it shouldn't be set.
2421 *
2422 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2423 *      aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2424 *      advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2425 *      the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2426 *      with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2427 *      For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2428 *
2429 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2430 *      of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2431 *
2432 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2433 *      (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2434 *
2435 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2436 *      reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2437 *      include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2438 *      adding _BW is supported today.
2439 *
2440 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2441 *      the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2442 *      Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2443 *
2444 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2445 *
2446 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2447 *      @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2448 *      field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2449 *      device_timestamp.
2450 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2451 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2452 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2453 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2454 *      radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2455 *
2456 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2457 *      from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2458 *      other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2459 *
2460 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2461 *      for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2462 *      enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2463 *      Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2464 *      that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2465 *      neither enabled.
2466 *
2467 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2468 *      deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2469 *      Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2470 *
2471 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2472 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2473 *      supported by HW.
2474 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2475 *      device.
2476 *
2477 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2478 *      them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2479 *      unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2480 *
2481 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2482 *      refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2483 *
2484 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2485 */
2486struct ieee80211_hw {
2487        struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2488        struct wiphy *wiphy;
2489        const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2490        void *priv;
2491        unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2492        unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2493        unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2494        int vif_data_size;
2495        int sta_data_size;
2496        int chanctx_data_size;
2497        int txq_data_size;
2498        u16 queues;
2499        u16 max_listen_interval;
2500        s8 max_signal;
2501        u8 max_rates;
2502        u8 max_report_rates;
2503        u8 max_rate_tries;
2504        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2505        u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2506        u8 max_tx_fragments;
2507        u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2508        u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2509        u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2510        struct {
2511                int units_pos;
2512                s16 accuracy;
2513        } radiotap_timestamp;
2514        netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2515        u8 uapsd_queues;
2516        u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2517        u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2518        const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2519        u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2520        u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2521        u8 weight_multiplier;
2522        u32 max_mtu;
2523};
2524
2525static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2526                                       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2527{
2528        return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2529}
2530#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)     _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2531
2532static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2533                                     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2534{
2535        return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2536}
2537#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)       _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2538
2539/**
2540 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2541 *
2542 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2543 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2544 */
2545struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2546        struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2547
2548        /* Keep last */
2549        struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2550};
2551
2552/**
2553 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2554 *
2555 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2556 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2557 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2558 * @status: channel-switch response status
2559 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2560 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2561 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2562 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2563 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2564 */
2565struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2566        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2567        struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2568        u8 action_code;
2569        u32 status;
2570        u32 timestamp;
2571        u16 switch_time;
2572        u16 switch_timeout;
2573        struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2574        u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2575};
2576
2577/**
2578 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2579 *
2580 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2581 *
2582 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2583 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2584 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2585 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2586 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2587 *
2588 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2589 */
2590struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2591
2592/**
2593 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2594 *
2595 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2596 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2597 */
2598static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2599{
2600        set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2601}
2602
2603/**
2604 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2605 *
2606 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2607 * @addr: the address to set
2608 */
2609static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2610{
2611        memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2612}
2613
2614static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2615ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2616                      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2617{
2618        if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2619                return NULL;
2620        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2621}
2622
2623static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2624ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2625                           const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2626{
2627        if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2628                return NULL;
2629        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2630}
2631
2632static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2633ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2634                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2635{
2636        if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2637                return NULL;
2638        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2639}
2640
2641/**
2642 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2643 * @hw: the hardware
2644 * @skb: the skb
2645 *
2646 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2647 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2648 */
2649void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2650
2651/**
2652 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2653 *
2654 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2655 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2656 *
2657 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2658 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2659 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2660 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2661 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2662 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2663 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2664 *
2665 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2666 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2667 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2668 *
2669 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2670 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2671 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2672 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2673 *
2674 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2675 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2676 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2677 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2678 *
2679 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2680 *
2681 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2682 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2683 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2684 * based on the receive flags.
2685 *
2686 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2687 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2688 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2689 * keys.
2690 *
2691 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2692 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2693 * handler.
2694 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2695 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2696 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2697 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2698 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2699 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2700 *
2701 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2702 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2703 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2704 *
2705 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2706 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2707 * requirements:
2708 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2709      mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2710      completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2711   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2712      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2713   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2714      encrypted with the new key and
2715   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2716   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2717 */
2718
2719/**
2720 * DOC: Powersave support
2721 *
2722 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2723 *
2724 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2725 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2726 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2727 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2728 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2729 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2730 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2731 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2732 *
2733 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2734 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2735 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2736 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2737 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2738 *
2739 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2740 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2741 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2742 *
2743 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2744 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2745 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2746 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2747 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2748 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2749 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2750 *
2751 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2752 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2753 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2754 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2755 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2756 * periods.
2757 *
2758 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2759 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2760 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2761 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2762 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2763 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2764 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2765 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2766 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2767 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2768 *
2769 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2770 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2771 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2772 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2773 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2774 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2775 *
2776 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2777 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2778 */
2779
2780/**
2781 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2782 *
2783 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2784 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2785 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2786 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2787 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2788 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2789 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2790 *
2791 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2792 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2793 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2794 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2795 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2796 *
2797 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2798 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2799 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2800 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2801 *
2802 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2803 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2804 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2805 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2806 *
2807 *  - a list of information element IDs
2808 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2809 *
2810 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2811 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2812 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2813 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2814 * vendor information elements.
2815 *
2816 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2817 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2818 *
2819 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2820 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2821 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2822 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2823 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2824 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2825 *
2826 *
2827 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2828 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2829 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2830 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2831 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2832 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2833 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2834 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2835 *
2836 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2837 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2838 * signal strength threshold checking.
2839 */
2840
2841/**
2842 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2843 *
2844 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2845 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2846 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2847 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2848 *
2849 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2850 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2851 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2852 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2853 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2854 * hardware flags.
2855 *
2856 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2857 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2858 * turned off otherwise.
2859 *
2860 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2861 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2862 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2863 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2864 */
2865
2866/**
2867 * DOC: Frame filtering
2868 *
2869 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2870 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2871 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2872 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2873 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2874 *
2875 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2876 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2877 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2878 *
2879 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2880 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2881 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2882 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2883 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2884 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2885 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2886 *
2887 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2888 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2889 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2890 * or dropped.
2891 *
2892 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2893 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2894 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2895 * the flag, but not clear it.
2896 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2897 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2898 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2899 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2900 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2901 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2902 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2903 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2904 */
2905
2906/**
2907 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2908 *
2909 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2910 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2911 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2912 *
2913 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2914 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2915 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2916 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2917 * the driver code.
2918 *
2919 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2920 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2921 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2922 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2923 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2924 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2925 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2926 *
2927 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2928 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2929 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2930 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2931 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2932 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2933 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2934 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2935 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2936 * @sta_notify callback.
2937 *
2938 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2939 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2940 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2941 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2942 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2943 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2944 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2945 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2946 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2947 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2948 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2949 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2950 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2951 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2952 *
2953 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2954 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2955 *
2956 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2957 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2958 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2959 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2960 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2961 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2962 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2963 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2964 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2965 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2966 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2967 *
2968 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2969 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2970 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2971 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2972 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2973 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2974 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2975 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2976 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2977 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2978 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2979 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2980 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2981 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2982 *
2983 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2984 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2985 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2986 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2987 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2988 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2989 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2990 *
2991 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2992 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2993 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2994 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2995 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2996 *
2997 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2998 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2999 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3000 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3001 */
3002
3003/**
3004 * DOC: HW queue control
3005 *
3006 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3007 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3008 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3009 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3010 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3011 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3012 *
3013 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3014 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3015 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3016 *
3017 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3018 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3019 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3020 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3021 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3022 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3023 * the hardware queue.
3024 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3025 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3026 *
3027 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3028 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3029 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3030 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3031 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3032 *
3033 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3034 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3035 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3036 * off-channel queue:         9
3037 *
3038 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3039 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3040 *
3041 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3042 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3043 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3044 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3045 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3046 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3047 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3048 *
3049 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3050 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3051 *
3052 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3053 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3054 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3055 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3056 */
3057
3058/**
3059 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3060 *
3061 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3062 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3063 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3064 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3065 *
3066 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3067 *      by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3068 *      multicast address.
3069 *
3070 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3071 *      %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3072 *
3073 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3074 *      the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3075 *
3076 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3077 *      to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3078 *      by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3079 *      mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3080 *      honour this flag if possible.
3081 *
3082 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3083 *      station
3084 *
3085 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3086 *
3087 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3088 *
3089 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3090 */
3091enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3092        FIF_ALLMULTI            = 1<<1,
3093        FIF_FCSFAIL             = 1<<2,
3094        FIF_PLCPFAIL            = 1<<3,
3095        FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3096        FIF_CONTROL             = 1<<5,
3097        FIF_OTHER_BSS           = 1<<6,
3098        FIF_PSPOLL              = 1<<7,
3099        FIF_PROBE_REQ           = 1<<8,
3100};
3101
3102/**
3103 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3104 *
3105 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3106 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3107 *
3108 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3109 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3110 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3111 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3112 *
3113 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3114 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3115 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3116 *      call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special
3117 *      status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3118 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3119 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3120 *      queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3121 *      driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3122 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3123 *      called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3124 *      ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3125 *      session is gone and removes the station.
3126 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3127 *      but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3128 *      now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3129 *      should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3130 */
3131enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3132        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3133        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3134        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3135        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3136        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3137        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3138        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3139};
3140
3141#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3142
3143/**
3144 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3145 *
3146 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3147 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3148 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3149 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3150 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3151 *      actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3152 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3153 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3154 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3155 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3156 *      valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3157 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3158 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3159 */
3160struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3161        enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3162        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3163        u16 tid;
3164        u16 ssn;
3165        u16 buf_size;
3166        bool amsdu;
3167        u16 timeout;
3168};
3169
3170/**
3171 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3172 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3173 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3174 *      frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3175 */
3176enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3177        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3178        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3179};
3180
3181/**
3182 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3183 *
3184 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3185 *      to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3186 *      information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3187 *      flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3188 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3189 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3190 *      changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3191 *      the peer.
3192 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3193 *      by the peer
3194 */
3195enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3196        IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED         = BIT(0),
3197        IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED       = BIT(1),
3198        IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3199        IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED        = BIT(3),
3200};
3201
3202/**
3203 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3204 *
3205 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3206 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3207 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3208 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3209 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3210 *
3211 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3212 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3213 *      for sending management frames offchannel.
3214 */
3215enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3216        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3217        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3218};
3219
3220/**
3221 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3222 *
3223 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3224 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3225 *
3226 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3227 *      (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3228 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3229 *      of wowlan configuration)
3230 */
3231enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3232        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3233        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3234};
3235
3236/**
3237 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3238 *
3239 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3240 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3241 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3242 *
3243 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3244 *      skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3245 *      The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3246 *      configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3247 *      preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3248 *      Must be atomic.
3249 *
3250 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3251 *      is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3252 *      frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3253 *      Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3254 *      or zero.
3255 *      When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3256 *      to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3257 *      is added.
3258 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3259 *
3260 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3261 *      is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3262 *      it must turn off frame reception.)
3263 *      May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3264 *      an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3265 *      you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3266 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3267 *
3268 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3269 *      stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3270 *      ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3271 *      configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3272 *      reconfigured at resume time.
3273 *      The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3274 *      wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3275 *      supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3276 *      must return 1 from this function.
3277 *
3278 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3279 *      now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3280 *      functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3281 *      to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3282 *      will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3283 *
3284 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3285 *      modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3286 *      supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3287 *      in suspend().
3288 *
3289 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3290 *      enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3291 *      and @stop must be implemented.
3292 *      The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3293 *      the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3294 *      interface is given in the conf parameter.
3295 *      The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3296 *      negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3297 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3298 *
3299 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3300 *      is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3301 *      switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3302 *      Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3303 *      found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3304 *
3305 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3306 *      The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3307 *      and no monitor interfaces are present.
3308 *      When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3309 *      must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3310 *      the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3311 *      MAC address of the device going away.
3312 *      Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3313 *
3314 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3315 *      function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3316 *      This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3317 *      if it does. The callback can sleep.
3318 *
3319 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3320 *      parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3321 *      level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3322 *      This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3323 *      for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3324 *      of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3325 *      can sleep.
3326 *
3327 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3328 *      This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3329 *      to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3330 *
3331 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3332 *      See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3333 *      This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3334 *
3335 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3336 *      This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3337 *      should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3338 *      of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3339 *      which flags are changed.
3340 *      This callback can sleep.
3341 *
3342 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3343 *      must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3344 *
3345 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3346 *      This callback is only called between add_interface and
3347 *      remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3348 *      is enabled.
3349 *      Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3350 *      The callback can sleep.
3351 *
3352 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3353 *      This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3354 *      which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3355 *      The callback must be atomic.
3356 *
3357 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3358 *      host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3359 *      necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3360 *      After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3361 *      userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3362 *
3363 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3364 *      WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3365 *      offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3366 *
3367 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3368 *      the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3369 *      configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3370 *      registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3371 *      that power save is disabled.
3372 *      The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3373 *      entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3374 *      at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3375 *      (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3376 *      When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3377 *      note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3378 *      any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3379 *      This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3380 *      this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3381 *      software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3382 *      capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3383 *      advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3384 *      The callback can sleep.
3385 *
3386 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3387 *      The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3388 *      but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3389 *      ieee80211_scan_completed().
3390 *      This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3391 *      scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3392 *      The callback can sleep.
3393 *
3394 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3395 *      specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3396 *      ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3397 *      This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3398 *
3399 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3400 *      In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3401 *
3402 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3403 *      is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3404 *      The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3405 *      the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3406 *      can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3407 *
3408 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3409 *      software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3410 *      this notification.
3411 *      The callback can sleep.
3412 *
3413 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3414 *      Returns zero if statistics are available.
3415 *      The callback can sleep.
3416 *
3417 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3418 *      IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3419 *      IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3420 *      The callback must be atomic.
3421 *
3422 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3423 *      if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3424 *      stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3425 *      should be set as well.
3426 *      The callback can sleep.
3427 *
3428 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3429 *      The callback can sleep.
3430 *
3431 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3432 *      AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3433 *
3434 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3435 *      station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3436 *      returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3437 *      no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3438 *      the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3439 *      This callback can sleep.
3440 *
3441 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3442 *      when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3443 *      should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3444 *      callback can sleep.
3445 *
3446 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3447 *      associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3448 *      in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3449 *      %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3450 *
3451 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3452 *      station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3453 *      This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3454 *      It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3455 *      up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3456 *      isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3457 *      period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3458 *      See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3459 *      The callback can sleep.
3460 *
3461 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3462 *      synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3463 *      pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3464 *      the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3465 *      in @sta_state.
3466 *      The callback can sleep.
3467 *
3468 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3469 *      used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3470 *      from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3471 *      in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3472 *      uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3473 *      otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3474 *      Must be atomic.
3475 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3476 *      is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3477 *      the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3478 *
3479 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3480 *      filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3481 *      let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3482 *      the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3483 *      all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3484 *      Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3485 *      The callback can sleep.
3486 *
3487 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3488 *      bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3489 *      Returns a negative error code on failure.
3490 *      The callback can sleep.
3491 *
3492 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3493 *      this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3494 *      required function.
3495 *      The callback can sleep.
3496 *
3497 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3498 *      Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3499 *      required function.
3500 *      The callback can sleep.
3501 *
3502 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3503 *      firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3504 *      calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3505 *      as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3506 *      The callback can sleep.
3507 *
3508 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3509 *      with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3510 *      function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3511 *      TSF synchronization.
3512 *      The callback can sleep.
3513 *
3514 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3515 *      This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3516 *      used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3517 *      Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3518 *      The callback can sleep.
3519 *
3520 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3521 *
3522 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3523 *      need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3524 *      and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3525 *      The callback can sleep.
3526 *
3527 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3528 *      in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3529 *      accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3530 *      estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3531 *      coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3532 *
3533 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3534 *      be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3535 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3536 *
3537 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3538 *      that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3539 *      of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3540 *      use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3541 *      If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3542 *      Note that vif can be NULL.
3543 *      The callback can sleep.
3544 *
3545 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3546 *      switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3547 *      callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3548 *      completion of the channel switch.
3549 *
3550 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3551 *      Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3552 *      reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3553 *      (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3554 *
3555 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3556 *
3557 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3558 *      call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3559 *      that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3560 *      offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3561 *      normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3562 *      duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3563 *      ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3564 *      Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3565 *      must be accepted in this case.
3566 *      This callback may sleep.
3567 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3568 *      aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3569 *
3570 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3571 *
3572 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3573 *
3574 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3575 *      queues before entering power save.
3576 *
3577 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3578 *      when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3579 *      The callback can sleep.
3580 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3581 *      &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3582 *      The callback must be atomic.
3583 *
3584 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3585 *      parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3586 *      sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3587 *      to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3588 *      Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3589 *      if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3590 *      the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3591 *      the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3592 *      more-data bit must always be set.
3593 *      The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3594 *      from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3595 *      In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3596 *      @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3597 *      this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3598 *      on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3599 *      period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3600 *      responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3601 *      In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3602 *      bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3603 *      at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3604 *      setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3605 *      service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3606 *      on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3607 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3608 *      This callback must be atomic.
3609 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3610 *      to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3611 *      via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3612 *      released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3613 *      and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3614 *      frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3615 *      them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3616 *      on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3617 *      bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3618 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3619 *      The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3620 *      frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3621 *      This callback must be atomic.
3622 *
3623 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3624 *
3625 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3626 *
3627 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3628 *      and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3629 *
3630 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3631 *      before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3632 *      bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3633 *      yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3634 *      transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3635 *      powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3636 *      management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3637 *      driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3638 *      and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3639 *      For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3640 *      would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3641 *      frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3642 *      The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3643 *      mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3644 *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3645 *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3646 *      The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3647 *
3648 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3649 *      a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3650 *      channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3651 *      setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3652 *      mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3653 *      discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3654 *      2 * (DTIM period).
3655 *      The callback is optional and can sleep.
3656 *
3657 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3658 *      This callback may sleep.
3659 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3660 *      This callback may sleep.
3661 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3662 *      may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3663 *      channel context with different settings
3664 *      This callback may sleep.
3665 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3666 *      to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3667 *      This callback may sleep.
3668 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3669 *      unbound from vif.
3670 *      This callback may sleep.
3671 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3672 *      another, as specified in the list of
3673 *      @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3674 *      to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3675 *      This callback may sleep.
3676 *
3677 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3678 *      information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3679 *      context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3680 *      software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3681 *      just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3682 *      disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3683 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3684 *
3685 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3686 *      during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3687 *      This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3688 *      indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3689 *      This callback may sleep.
3690 *
3691 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3692 *      Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3693 *      This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3694 *
3695 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3696 *      Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3697 *      function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3698 *      decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3699 *      ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3700 *      get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3701 *      1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3702 *      transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3703 *      If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3704 *      since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3705 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3706 *      before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3707 *      gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3708 *      the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3709 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3710 *      after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3711 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3712 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3713 *      when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3714 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3715 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3716 *      when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3717 *      CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3718 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3719 *      information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3720 *      channel context is bound before this is called.
3721 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3722 *
3723 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3724 *      specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3725 *      if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3726 *
3727 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3728 *      and hardware limits.
3729 *
3730 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3731 *      is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3732 *      and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3733 *      driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3734 *      the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3735 *      The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3736 *      optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3737 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3738 *      peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3739 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3740 *      response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3741 *      parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3742 *      an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3743 *      response template is provided, together with the location of the
3744 *      switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3745 *      the function call.
3746 *
3747 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3748 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3749 *      synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3750 *      pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3751 *      currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3752 *
3753 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3754 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3755 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3756 *      contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3757 *      are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3758 *      The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3759 *      some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3760 *      changed parameters.
3761 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3762 *      cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3763 *      this call.
3764 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3765 *      ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3766 *      NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3767 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3768 *      aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3769 *      between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3770 *      skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3771 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3772 *      Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3773 *
3774 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3775 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3776 */
3777struct ieee80211_ops {
3778        void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3779                   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3780                   struct sk_buff *skb);
3781        int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3782        void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3783#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3784        int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3785        int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3786        void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3787#endif
3788        int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3789                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3790        int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3791                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3792                                enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3793        void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3794                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3795        int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3796        void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3798                                 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3799                                 u32 changed);
3800
3801        int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3802        void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3803
3804        u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805                                 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3806        void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3807                                 unsigned int changed_flags,
3808                                 unsigned int *total_flags,
3809                                 u64 multicast);
3810        void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3812                                    unsigned int filter_flags,
3813                                    unsigned int changed_flags);
3814        int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3815                       bool set);
3816        int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3817                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3818                       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3819        void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3820                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3821                                struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3822                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3823                                u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3824        void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3825                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3826                               struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3827        void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3828                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3829        int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3830                       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3831        void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3832                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3833        int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3834                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3835                                struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3836                                struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3837        int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3838                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3839        void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841                              const u8 *mac_addr);
3842        void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3844        int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845                         struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3846        void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3847                            struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3848                            struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3849        int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3850        int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3851        int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3852                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3853        int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3854                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3855#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3856        void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3857                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3859                                struct dentry *dir);
3860#endif
3861        void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3862                        enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3863        int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3864                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3866        int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3867                         struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3868                         enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3869                         enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3870        void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3871                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3872                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3873        void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3874                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3875                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3876                              u32 changed);
3877        void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3878                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3879                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3880        void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3881                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3882                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3883                               struct station_info *sinfo);
3884        int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3886                       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3887        u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3888        void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3889                        u64 tsf);
3890        void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3891                           s64 offset);
3892        void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3893        int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3894
3895        /**
3896         * @ampdu_action:
3897         * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3898         * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3899         * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3900         * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3901         * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3902         * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3903         * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3904         * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3905         * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3906         *
3907         * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3908         * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3909         * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3910         *
3911         * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3912         * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3913         *
3914         * - ``TX:        1   or``
3915         * - ``TX:        18  or``
3916         * - ``TX:        81``
3917         *
3918         * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3919         *
3920         * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3921         * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3922         * if the session can start immediately.
3923         *
3924         * The callback can sleep.
3925         */
3926        int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3928                            struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3929        int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3930                struct survey_info *survey);
3931        void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3932        void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3933#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3934        int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3935                            void *data, int len);
3936        int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3937                             struct netlink_callback *cb,
3938                             void *data, int len);
3939#endif
3940        void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941                      u32 queues, bool drop);
3942        void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3943                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3944                               struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3945        int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3946        int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3947
3948        int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3950                                 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3951                                 int duration,
3952                                 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3953        int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3955        int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3956        void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957                              u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3958        bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3959        int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960                                const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3961        void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963                               const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3964
3965        void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3967                                      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3968                                      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3969                                      bool more_data);
3970        void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971                                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3972                                        u16 tids, int num_frames,
3973                                        enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3974                                        bool more_data);
3975
3976        int     (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3978        void    (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980                                struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3981        void    (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983                                  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3984
3985        void    (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3986                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3987                                  u16 duration);
3988
3989        void    (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990                                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3991
3992        int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993                           struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3994        void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3996        void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3997                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3998                               u32 changed);
3999        int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001                                  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4002        void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004                                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4005        int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006                                  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4007                                  int n_vifs,
4008                                  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4009
4010        void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011                                  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4012
4013#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4014        void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4015                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4016                                 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4017#endif
4018        void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4020                                      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4021        int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023                                  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4024
4025        int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4027        void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4029        void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031                                         struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4032
4033        int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4034        void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4035        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4037        int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038                           int *dbm);
4039
4040        int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4043                                   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4044                                   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4045        void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4047                                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4048        void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4049                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050                                         struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4051
4052        void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4054        void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4055
4056        int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058                         struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4059        int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4061        int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4062                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4063                               struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4064        int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4066                            const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4067        void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069                            u8 instance_id);
4070        bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071                                       struct sk_buff *head,
4072                                       struct sk_buff *skb);
4073        int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4075                                       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4076        int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077                          struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4078        void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4079                           struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4080};
4081
4082/**
4083 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4084 *
4085 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4086 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4087 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4088 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4089 * @priv_data_len.
4090 *
4091 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4092 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4093 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4094 *      NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4095 *
4096 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4097 */
4098struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4099                                           const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4100                                           const char *requested_name);
4101
4102/**
4103 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4104 *
4105 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4106 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4107 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4108 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4109 * @priv_data_len.
4110 *
4111 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4112 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4113 *
4114 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4115 */
4116static inline
4117struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4118                                        const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4119{
4120        return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4121}
4122
4123/**
4124 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4125 *
4126 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4127 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4128 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4129 *
4130 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4131 *
4132 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4133 */
4134int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4135
4136/**
4137 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4138 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4139 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4140 *      (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4141 */
4142struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4143        int throughput;
4144        int blink_time;
4145};
4146
4147/**
4148 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4149 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4150 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4151 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4152 *      interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4153 */
4154enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4155        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO          = BIT(0),
4156        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK           = BIT(1),
4157        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED      = BIT(2),
4158};
4159
4160#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4161const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4162const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4163const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4164const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4165const char *
4166__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4167                                   unsigned int flags,
4168                                   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4169                                   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4170#endif
4171/**
4172 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4173 *
4174 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4175 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4176 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4177 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4178 *
4179 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4180 *
4181 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4182 */
4183static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4184{
4185#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4186        return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4187#else
4188        return NULL;
4189#endif
4190}
4191
4192/**
4193 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4194 *
4195 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4196 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4197 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4198 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4199 *
4200 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4201 *
4202 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4203 */
4204static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4205{
4206#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4207        return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4208#else
4209        return NULL;
4210#endif
4211}
4212
4213/**
4214 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4215 *
4216 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4217 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4218 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4219 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4220 *
4221 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4222 *
4223 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4224 */
4225static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4226{
4227#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4228        return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4229#else
4230        return NULL;
4231#endif
4232}
4233
4234/**
4235 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4236 *
4237 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4238 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4239 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4240 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4241 *
4242 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4243 *
4244 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4245 */
4246static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4247{
4248#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4249        return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4250#else
4251        return NULL;
4252#endif
4253}
4254
4255/**
4256 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4257 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4258 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4259 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4260 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4261 *
4262 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4263 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4264 *
4265 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4266 */
4267static inline const char *
4268ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4269                                 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4270                                 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4271{
4272#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4273        return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4274                                                  blink_table_len);
4275#else
4276        return NULL;
4277#endif
4278}
4279
4280/**
4281 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4282 *
4283 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4284 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4285 *
4286 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4287 */
4288void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4289
4290/**
4291 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4292 *
4293 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4294 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4295 * before calling this function.
4296 *
4297 * @hw: the hardware to free
4298 */
4299void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4300
4301/**
4302 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4303 *
4304 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4305 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4306 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4307 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4308 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4309 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4310 *
4311 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4312 */
4313void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4314
4315/**
4316 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4317 *
4318 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4319 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4320 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4321 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4322 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4323 *
4324 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4325 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4326 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4327 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4328 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4329 *
4330 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4331 *
4332 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4333 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4334 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4335 * @napi: the NAPI context
4336 */
4337void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4338                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4339
4340/**
4341 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4342 *
4343 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4344 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4345 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4346 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4347 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4348 *
4349 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4350 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4351 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4352 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4353 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4354 *
4355 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4356 *
4357 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4358 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4359 */
4360static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4361{
4362        ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4363}
4364
4365/**
4366 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4367 *
4368 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4369 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4370 *
4371 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4372 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4373 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4374 *
4375 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4376 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4377 */
4378void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4379
4380/**
4381 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4382 *
4383 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4384 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4385 *
4386 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4387 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4388 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4389 *
4390 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4391 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4392 */
4393static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394                                   struct sk_buff *skb)
4395{
4396        local_bh_disable();
4397        ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4398        local_bh_enable();
4399}
4400
4401/**
4402 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4403 *
4404 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4405 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4406 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4407 *
4408 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4409 *
4410 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4411 * each other.
4412 *
4413 * @sta: currently connected sta
4414 * @start: start or stop PS
4415 *
4416 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4417 */
4418int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4419
4420/**
4421 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4422 *                                  (in process context)
4423 *
4424 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4425 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4426 * applies.
4427 *
4428 * @sta: currently connected sta
4429 * @start: start or stop PS
4430 *
4431 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4432 */
4433static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4434                                                  bool start)
4435{
4436        int ret;
4437
4438        local_bh_disable();
4439        ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4440        local_bh_enable();
4441
4442        return ret;
4443}
4444
4445/**
4446 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4447 * @sta: currently connected station
4448 *
4449 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4450 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4451 * connected station was received.
4452 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4453 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4454 * be serialized.
4455 */
4456void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4457
4458/**
4459 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4460 * @sta: currently connected station
4461 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4462 *
4463 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4464 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4465 * from a connected station was received.
4466 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4467 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4468 * serialized.
4469 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4470 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4471 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4472 * checks.
4473 */
4474void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4475
4476/*
4477 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4478 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4479 */
4480#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM    ALIGN(14, 4)
4481
4482/**
4483 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4484 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4485 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4486 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4487 *
4488 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4489 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4490 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4491 *
4492 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4493 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4494 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4495 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4496 *
4497 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4498 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4499 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4500 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4501 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4502 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4503 *
4504 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4505 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4506 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4507 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4508 * use this API.
4509 */
4510void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4511                                u8 tid, bool buffered);
4512
4513/**
4514 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4515 *
4516 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4517 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4518 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4519 *
4520 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4521 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4522 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4523 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4524 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4525 */
4526void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4527                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4528                            struct sk_buff *skb,
4529                            struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4530                            int max_rates);
4531
4532/**
4533 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4534 *
4535 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4536 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4537 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4538 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4539 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4540 * slow stations to starve).
4541 *
4542 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4543 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4544 */
4545void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4546                                           u32 thr);
4547
4548/**
4549 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4550 *
4551 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4552 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4553 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4554 *
4555 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4556 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4557 * @info: tx status information
4558 */
4559void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560                              struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4561                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4562
4563/**
4564 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4565 *
4566 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4567 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4568 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4569 *
4570 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4571 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4572 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4573 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4574 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4575 *
4576 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4577 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4578 */
4579void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4580                         struct sk_buff *skb);
4581
4582/**
4583 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4584 *
4585 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4586 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4587 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4588 *
4589 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4590 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4591 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4592 *
4593 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4594 * @status: tx status information
4595 */
4596void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4597                             struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4598
4599/**
4600 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4601 *
4602 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4603 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4604 * specific skbs.
4605 *
4606 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4607 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4608 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4609 *
4610 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4611 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4612 *      (NULL for multicast packets)
4613 * @info: tx status information
4614 */
4615static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4616                                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4617                                             struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4618{
4619        struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4620                .sta = sta,
4621                .info = info,
4622        };
4623
4624        ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4625}
4626
4627/**
4628 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4629 *
4630 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4631 *
4632 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4633 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4634 * for a single hardware.
4635 *
4636 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4637 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4638 */
4639static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4640                                          struct sk_buff *skb)
4641{
4642        local_bh_disable();
4643        ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4644        local_bh_enable();
4645}
4646
4647/**
4648 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4649 *
4650 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4651 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4652 *
4653 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4654 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4655 *
4656 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4657 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4658 */
4659void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4660                                 struct sk_buff *skb);
4661
4662/**
4663 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4664 *
4665 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4666 * connected STA.
4667 *
4668 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4669 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4670 */
4671void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4672
4673#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4674
4675/**
4676 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4677 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4678 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4679 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4680 *      to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4681 *      should be ignored.
4682 */
4683struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4684        u16 tim_offset;
4685        u16 tim_length;
4686
4687        u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4688};
4689
4690/**
4691 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4692 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4693 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4694 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4695 *      receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4696 *
4697 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4698 * obtain the beacon template.
4699 *
4700 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4701 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4702 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4703 * applicable, the CSA count.
4704 *
4705 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4706 *
4707 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4708 */
4709struct sk_buff *
4710ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4711                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4712                              struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4713
4714/**
4715 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4716 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4717 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4718 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4719 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4720 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4721 *      (including the ID and length bytes!).
4722 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4723 *
4724 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4725 * obtain the beacon frame.
4726 *
4727 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4728 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4729 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4730 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4731 *
4732 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4733 *
4734 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4735 */
4736struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4737                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4738                                         u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4739
4740/**
4741 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4742 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4743 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4744 *
4745 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4746 *
4747 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4748 */
4749static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4750                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4751{
4752        return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4753}
4754
4755/**
4756 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4758 *
4759 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4760 * This function is called implicitly when
4761 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4762 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4763 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4764 *
4765 * Return: new csa counter value
4766 */
4767u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4768
4769/**
4770 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4771 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4772 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4773 *
4774 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4775 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4776 *
4777 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4778 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4779 */
4780void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4781
4782/**
4783 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4784 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4785 *
4786 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4787 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4788 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4789 */
4790void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4791
4792/**
4793 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4794 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4795 *
4796 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4797 */
4798bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4799
4800
4801/**
4802 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4803 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4805 *
4806 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4807 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4808 *
4809 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4810 *
4811 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4812 */
4813struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4814                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4815
4816/**
4817 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4818 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4819 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4820 *
4821 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4822 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4823 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4824 *
4825 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4826 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4827 *
4828 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4829 */
4830struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4831                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4832
4833/**
4834 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4835 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4836 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4837 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4838 *      if at all possible
4839 *
4840 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4841 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4842 * BSSID and address is used.
4843 *
4844 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4845 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4846 *
4847 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4848 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4849 *
4850 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4851 */
4852struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4853                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4854                                       bool qos_ok);
4855
4856/**
4857 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4858 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4859 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4860 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4861 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4862 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4863 *
4864 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4865 * hardware.
4866 *
4867 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4868 */
4869struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4870                                       const u8 *src_addr,
4871                                       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4872                                       size_t tailroom);
4873
4874/**
4875 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4876 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4878 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4879 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4880 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4881 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4882 *
4883 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4884 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4885 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4886 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4887 */
4888void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4889                       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4890                       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4891                       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4892
4893/**
4894 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4895 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4896 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4897 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4898 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4899 *
4900 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4901 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4902 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4903 *
4904 * Return: The duration.
4905 */
4906__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4907                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4908                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4909
4910/**
4911 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4912 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4913 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4914 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4915 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4916 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4917 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4918 *
4919 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4920 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4921 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4922 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4923 */
4924void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4925                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4926                             const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4927                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4928                             struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4929
4930/**
4931 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4932 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4934 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4935 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4936 *
4937 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4938 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4939 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4940 *
4941 * Return: The duration.
4942 */
4943__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4944                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4945                                    size_t frame_len,
4946                                    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4947
4948/**
4949 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4950 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4952 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4953 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4954 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4955 *
4956 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4957 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4958 *
4959 * Return: The duration.
4960 */
4961__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4962                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4963                                        enum nl80211_band band,
4964                                        size_t frame_len,
4965                                        struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4966
4967/**
4968 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4969 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4970 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4971 *
4972 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4973 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4974 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4975 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4976 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4977 *
4978 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4979 * frames are available.
4980 *
4981 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4982 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4983 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4984 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4985 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4986 * use common code for all beacons.
4987 */
4988struct sk_buff *
4989ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4990
4991/**
4992 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4993 *
4994 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4995 *
4996 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4997 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4998 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4999 */
5000void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5001                               u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5002
5003/**
5004 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5005 *
5006 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5007 * from the given packet.
5008 *
5009 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5010 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5011 *      with this P1K
5012 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5013 */
5014static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5015                                          struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5016{
5017        struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5018        const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5019        u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5020
5021        ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5022}
5023
5024/**
5025 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5026 *
5027 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5028 * and transmitter address.
5029 *
5030 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5031 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5032 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5033 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5034 */
5035void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5036                               const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5037
5038/**
5039 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5040 *
5041 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5042 * in the packet.
5043 *
5044 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5045 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5046 *      encrypted with this key
5047 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5048 */
5049void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5050                            struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5051
5052/**
5053 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5054 *
5055 * @pos: start of crypto header
5056 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5057 * @pn: PN to add
5058 *
5059 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5060 * the packet payload)
5061 *
5062 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5063 * point to the crypto header)
5064 */
5065u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5066
5067/**
5068 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5069 *
5070 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5071 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5072 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5073 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5074 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5075 *
5076 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5077 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5078 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5079 *
5080 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5081 * can be done concurrently.
5082 */
5083void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5084                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5085
5086/**
5087 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5088 *
5089 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5090 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5091 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5092 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5093 * @seq: new sequence data
5094 *
5095 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5096 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5097 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5098 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5099 *
5100 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5101 * can be done concurrently.
5102 */
5103void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5104                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5105
5106/**
5107 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5108 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5109 *
5110 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5111 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5112 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5113 *
5114 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5115 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5116 */
5117void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5118
5119/**
5120 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5121 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5122 * @keyconf: new key data
5123 *
5124 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5125 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5126 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5127 *
5128 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5129 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5130 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5131 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5132 *
5133 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5134 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5135 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5136 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5137 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5138 * of the reconfiguration.
5139 *
5140 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5141 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5142 *
5143 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5144 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5145 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5146 * the key that's being replaced.
5147 */
5148struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5149ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5150                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5151
5152/**
5153 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5154 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5155 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5156 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5157 * @gfp: allocation flags
5158 */
5159void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5160                                const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5161
5162/**
5163 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5164 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5165 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5166 *
5167 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5168 */
5169void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5170
5171/**
5172 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5173 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5174 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5175 *
5176 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5177 */
5178void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5179
5180/**
5181 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5182 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5183 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5184 *
5185 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5186 *
5187 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5188 */
5189
5190int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5191
5192/**
5193 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5194 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5195 *
5196 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5197 */
5198void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5199
5200/**
5201 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5202 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5203 *
5204 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5205 */
5206void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5207
5208/**
5209 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5210 *
5211 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5212 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5213 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5214 * any context, including hardirq context.
5215 *
5216 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5217 * @info: information about the completed scan
5218 */
5219void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5220                              struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5221
5222/**
5223 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5224 *
5225 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5226 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5227 *
5228 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5229 */
5230void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5231
5232/**
5233 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5234 *
5235 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5236 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5237 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5238 * while associating, for instance.
5239 *
5240 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5241 */
5242void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5243
5244/**
5245 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5246 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5247 *      been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5248 *      reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5249 *      interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5250 *      haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5251 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5252 *      interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5253 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5254 */
5255enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5256        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL     = 0,
5257        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5258        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE     = BIT(1),
5259};
5260
5261/**
5262 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5263 *
5264 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5265 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5266 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5267 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5268 *
5269 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5270 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5271 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5272 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5273 */
5274void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5275                                  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5276                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5277                                  void *data);
5278
5279/**
5280 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5281 *
5282 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5283 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5284 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5285 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5286 * be used.
5287 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5288 *
5289 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5290 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5291 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5292 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5293 */
5294static inline void
5295ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5296                                    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5297                                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5298                                    void *data)
5299{
5300        ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5301                                     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5302                                     iterator, data);
5303}
5304
5305/**
5306 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5307 *
5308 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5309 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5310 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5311 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5312 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5313 *
5314 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5315 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5316 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5317 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5318 */
5319void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5320                                                u32 iter_flags,
5321                                                void (*iterator)(void *data,
5322                                                    u8 *mac,
5323                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5324                                                void *data);
5325
5326/**
5327 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5328 *
5329 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5330 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5331 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5332 *
5333 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5334 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5335 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5336 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5337 */
5338void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5339                                              u32 iter_flags,
5340                                              void (*iterator)(void *data,
5341                                                u8 *mac,
5342                                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5343                                              void *data);
5344
5345/**
5346 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5347 *
5348 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5349 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5350 * function for them.
5351 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5352 *
5353 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5354 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5355 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5356 */
5357void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5358                                       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5359                                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5360                                       void *data);
5361/**
5362 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5363 *
5364 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5365 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5366 *
5367 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5368 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5369 */
5370void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5371
5372/**
5373 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5374 *
5375 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5376 * workqueue.
5377 *
5378 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5379 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5380 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5381 */
5382void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5383                                  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5384                                  unsigned long delay);
5385
5386/**
5387 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5388 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5389 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5390 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5391 *
5392 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5393 *
5394 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5395 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5396 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5397 */
5398int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5399                                  u16 timeout);
5400
5401/**
5402 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5404 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5405 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5406 *
5407 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5408 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5409 * from any context.
5410 */
5411void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5412                                      u16 tid);
5413
5414/**
5415 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5416 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5417 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5418 *
5419 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5420 *
5421 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5422 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5423 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5424 */
5425int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5426
5427/**
5428 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5429 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5430 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5431 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5432 *
5433 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5434 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5435 * can be called from any context.
5436 */
5437void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5438                                     u16 tid);
5439
5440/**
5441 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5442 *
5443 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5444 * @addr: station's address
5445 *
5446 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5447 *
5448 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5449 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5450 */
5451struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5452                                         const u8 *addr);
5453
5454/**
5455 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5456 *
5457 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5458 * @addr: remote station's address
5459 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5460 *
5461 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5462 *
5463 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5464 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5465 *
5466 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5467 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5468 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5469 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5470 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5471 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5472 *      is not reliable.
5473 *
5474 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5475 */
5476struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5477                                               const u8 *addr,
5478                                               const u8 *localaddr);
5479
5480/**
5481 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5482 * @hw: the hardware
5483 * @pubsta: the station
5484 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5485 *
5486 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5487 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5488 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5489 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5490 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5491 *
5492 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5493 * manner.
5494 *
5495 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5496 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5497 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5498 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5499 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5500 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5501 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5502 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5503 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5504 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5505 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5506 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5507 * woke up while blocked or not.
5508 */
5509void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5510                               struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5511
5512/**
5513 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5514 * @pubsta: the station
5515 *
5516 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5517 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5518 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5519 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5520 *
5521 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5522 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5523 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5524 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5525 *
5526 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5527 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5528 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5529 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5530 */
5531void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5532
5533/**
5534 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5535 * @pubsta: the station
5536 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5537 *
5538 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5539 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5540 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5541 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5542 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5543 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5544 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5545 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5546 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5547 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5548 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5549 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5550 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5551 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5552 */
5553void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5554
5555/**
5556 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5557 *
5558 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5559 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5560 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5561 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5562 *
5563 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5564 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5565 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5566 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5567 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5568 * attempts.
5569 *
5570 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5571 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5572 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5573 * them to 0.
5574 *
5575 * @pubsta: the station
5576 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5577 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5578 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5579 */
5580void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5581                                    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5582
5583/**
5584 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5585 *
5586 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5587 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5588 *
5589 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5590 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5591 */
5592bool
5593ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5594
5595/**
5596 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5597 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5598 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5599 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5600 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5601 *
5602 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5603 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5604 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5605 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5606 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5607 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5608 *
5609 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5610 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5611 * set_key callback.
5612 */
5613void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5614                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5615                         void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5616                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5617                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5618                                      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5619                                      void *data),
5620                         void *iter_data);
5621
5622/**
5623 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5624 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5625 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5626 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5627 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5628 *
5629 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5630 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5631 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5632 * in removal process will be skipped.
5633 *
5634 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5635 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5636 */
5637void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5638                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5639                             void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5640                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5641                                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5642                                          struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5643                                          void *data),
5644                             void *iter_data);
5645
5646/**
5647 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5648 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5649 * @iter: iterator function
5650 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5651 *
5652 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5653 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5654 * places while calling into the driver.
5655 *
5656 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5657 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5658 * removed.
5659 *
5660 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5661 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5662 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5663 * or not.
5664 */
5665void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5666        struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5667        void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5668                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5669                     void *data),
5670        void *iter_data);
5671
5672/**
5673 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5674 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5675 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5676 *
5677 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5678 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5679 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5680 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5681 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5682 * %NULL.
5683 *
5684 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5685 */
5686struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5687                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5688
5689/**
5690 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5691 *
5692 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5693 *
5694 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5695 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5696 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5697 */
5698void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5699
5700/**
5701 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5702 *
5703 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5704 *
5705 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5706 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5707 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5708 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5709 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5710 *
5711 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5712 * without connection recovery attempts.
5713 */
5714void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5715
5716/**
5717 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5718 *
5719 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5720 *
5721 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5722 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5723 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5724 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5725 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5726 *
5727 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5728 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5729 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5730 * disconnect normally later.
5731 *
5732 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5733 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5734 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5735 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5736 */
5737void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5738
5739/**
5740 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5741 *      rssi threshold triggered
5742 *
5743 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5744 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5745 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5746 * @gfp: context flags
5747 *
5748 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5749 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5750 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5751 */
5752void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5753                               enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5754                               s32 rssi_level,
5755                               gfp_t gfp);
5756
5757/**
5758 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5759 *
5760 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5761 * @gfp: context flags
5762 */
5763void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5764
5765/**
5766 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5767 *
5768 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5769 */
5770void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5771
5772/**
5773 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5774 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5775 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5776 *
5777 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5778 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5779 */
5780void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5781
5782/**
5783 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5784 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5785 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5786 *
5787 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5788 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5789 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5790 */
5791void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5792                            enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5793
5794/**
5795 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5796 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5797 */
5798void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5799
5800/**
5801 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5802 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5803 */
5804void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5805
5806/**
5807 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5808 *
5809 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5810 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5811 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5812 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5813 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5814 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5815 *
5816 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5817 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5818 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5819 */
5820void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5821                                  const u8 *addr);
5822
5823/**
5824 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5825 * @pubsta: station struct
5826 * @tid: the session's TID
5827 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5828 *      assumed to be out of the window after the call
5829 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5830 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5831 *
5832 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5833 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5834 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5835 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5836 */
5837void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5838                                          u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5839                                          u16 received_mpdus);
5840
5841/**
5842 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5843 *
5844 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5845 * buffer.
5846 *
5847 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5848 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5849 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5850 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5851 */
5852void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5853
5854/**
5855 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5856 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5857 * @addr: station mac address
5858 * @tid: the rx tid
5859 */
5860void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5861                                 unsigned int tid);
5862
5863/**
5864 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5865 *
5866 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5867 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5868 * reordering.
5869 *
5870 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5871 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5872 *
5873 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5874 * @addr: station mac address
5875 * @tid: the rx tid
5876 */
5877static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5878                                                      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5879{
5880        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5881                return;
5882        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5883}
5884
5885/**
5886 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5887 *
5888 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5889 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5890 * reordering.
5891 *
5892 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5893 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5894 *
5895 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5896 * @addr: station mac address
5897 * @tid: the rx tid
5898 */
5899static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5900                                                     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5901{
5902        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5903                return;
5904        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5905}
5906
5907/**
5908 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5909 *
5910 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5911 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5912 *
5913 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5914 *
5915 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5916 * @addr: station mac address
5917 * @tid: the rx tid
5918 */
5919void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5920                                   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5921
5922/* Rate control API */
5923
5924/**
5925 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5926 *
5927 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5928 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5929 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5930 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5931 *      to be filled in
5932 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5933 *      which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5934 *      used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5935 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5936 *      RTS threshold
5937 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5938 *      if the selected rate supports it
5939 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5940 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5941 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5942 */
5943struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5944        struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5945        struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5946        struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5947        struct sk_buff *skb;
5948        struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5949        bool rts, short_preamble;
5950        u32 rate_idx_mask;
5951        u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5952        bool bss;
5953};
5954
5955/**
5956 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5957 */
5958enum rate_control_capabilities {
5959        /**
5960         * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5961         * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5962         * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5963         * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5964         * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5965         */
5966        RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5967};
5968
5969struct rate_control_ops {
5970        unsigned long capa;
5971        const char *name;
5972        void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5973        void (*free)(void *priv);
5974
5975        void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5976        void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5977                          struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5978                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5979        void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5980                            struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5981                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5982                            u32 changed);
5983        void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5984                         void *priv_sta);
5985
5986        void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5987                              struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5988                              void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5989        void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5990                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5991                          struct sk_buff *skb);
5992        void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5993                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5994
5995        void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5996                                struct dentry *dir);
5997
5998        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5999};
6000
6001static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6002                                 enum nl80211_band band,
6003                                 int index)
6004{
6005        return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6006}
6007
6008static inline s8
6009rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6010                  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6011{
6012        int i;
6013
6014        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6015                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6016                        return i;
6017
6018        /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6019        WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6020
6021        /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6022        return 0;
6023}
6024
6025static inline
6026bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6027                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6028{
6029        unsigned int i;
6030
6031        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6032                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6033                        return true;
6034        return false;
6035}
6036
6037/**
6038 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6039 *
6040 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6041 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6042 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6043 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6044 *
6045 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6046 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6047 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6048 */
6049int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6050                           struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6051                           struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6052
6053int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6054void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6055
6056static inline bool
6057conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6058{
6059        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6060}
6061
6062static inline bool
6063conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6064{
6065        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6066               conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6067}
6068
6069static inline bool
6070conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6071{
6072        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6073               conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6074}
6075
6076static inline bool
6077conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6078{
6079        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6080}
6081
6082static inline bool
6083conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6084{
6085        return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6086                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6087                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6088}
6089
6090static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6091ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6092{
6093        if (p2p) {
6094                switch (type) {
6095                case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6096                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6097                case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6098                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6099                default:
6100                        break;
6101                }
6102        }
6103        return type;
6104}
6105
6106static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6107ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6108{
6109        return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6110}
6111
6112/**
6113 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6114 *
6115 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6116 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6117 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6118 *
6119 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6120 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6121 * matching GroupId management frame.
6122 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6123 */
6124void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6125                                const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6126
6127void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6128                                   int rssi_min_thold,
6129                                   int rssi_max_thold);
6130
6131void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6132
6133/**
6134 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6135 *
6136 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6137 *
6138 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6139 *
6140 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6141 * applicable.
6142 */
6143int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6144
6145/**
6146 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6147 * @vif: virtual interface
6148 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6149 * @gfp: allocation flags
6150 *
6151 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6152 */
6153void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6154                                    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6155                                    gfp_t gfp);
6156
6157/**
6158 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6159 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6160 * @vif: virtual interface
6161 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6162 * @band: the band to transmit on
6163 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6164 *
6165 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6166 */
6167bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6168                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6169                              int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6170
6171/**
6172 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6173 *
6174 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6175 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6176 *
6177 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6178 *
6179 * private:
6180 *
6181 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6182 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6183 */
6184struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6185        u32 next_tsf;
6186        bool has_next_tsf;
6187
6188        u8 absent;
6189
6190        u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6191        struct {
6192                u32 start;
6193                u32 duration;
6194                u32 interval;
6195        } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6196};
6197
6198/**
6199 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6200 *
6201 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6202 * @data: NoA tracking data
6203 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6204 *
6205 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6206 */
6207int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6208                            struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6209
6210/**
6211 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6212 *
6213 * @data: NoA tracking data
6214 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6215 */
6216void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6217
6218/**
6219 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6220 * @vif: virtual interface
6221 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6222 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6223 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6224 * @gfp: allocation flags
6225 *
6226 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6227 */
6228void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6229                                 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6230                                 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6231
6232/**
6233 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6234 *
6235 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6236 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6237 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6238 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6239 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6240 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6241 *
6242 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6243 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6244 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6245 *
6246 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6247 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6248 *
6249 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6250 */
6251int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6252
6253/**
6254 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6255 *
6256 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6257 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6258 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6259 *
6260 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6261 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6262 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6263 *
6264 * @sta: the station
6265 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6266 */
6267void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6268
6269/**
6270 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6271 *
6272 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6273 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6274 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6275 *
6276 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6277 *
6278 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6279 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6280 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6281 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6282 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6283 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6284 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6285 *
6286 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6287 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6288 */
6289struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6290                                     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6291
6292/**
6293 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6294 * (in process context)
6295 *
6296 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6297 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6298 *
6299 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6300 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6301 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6302 */
6303static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6304                                                      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6305{
6306        struct sk_buff *skb;
6307
6308        local_bh_disable();
6309        skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6310        local_bh_enable();
6311
6312        return skb;
6313}
6314
6315/**
6316 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6317 *
6318 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6319 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6320 *
6321 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6322 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6323 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6324 */
6325struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6326
6327/**
6328 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6329 *
6330 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6331 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6332 *
6333 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6334 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6335 */
6336void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6337
6338/* (deprecated) */
6339static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6340{
6341}
6342
6343void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6344                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6345
6346/**
6347 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6348 *
6349 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6350 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6351 *
6352 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6353 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6354 *
6355 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6356 * this TXQ internally.
6357 */
6358static inline void
6359ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6360{
6361        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6362}
6363
6364/**
6365 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6366 *
6367 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6368 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6369 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6370 *
6371 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6372 * internally.
6373 */
6374static inline void
6375ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6376                     bool force)
6377{
6378        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6379}
6380
6381/**
6382 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6383 *
6384 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6385 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6386 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6387 * next_txq().
6388 *
6389 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6390 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6391 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6392 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6393 * again.
6394 *
6395 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6396 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6397 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6398 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6399 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6400 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6401 *
6402 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6403 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6404 */
6405bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6406                                struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6407
6408/**
6409 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6410 *
6411 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6412 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6413 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6414 *
6415 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6416 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6417 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6418 */
6419void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6420                             unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6421                             unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6422
6423/**
6424 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6425 *
6426 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6427 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6428 *
6429 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6430 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6431 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6432 * @gfp: allocation flags
6433 */
6434void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6435                                   u8 inst_id,
6436                                   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6437                                   gfp_t gfp);
6438
6439/**
6440 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6441 *
6442 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6443 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6444 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6445 *
6446 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6447 * @match: match event information
6448 * @gfp: allocation flags
6449 */
6450void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6451                              struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6452                              gfp_t gfp);
6453
6454/**
6455 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6456 *
6457 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6458 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6459 *
6460 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6461 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6462 *          information.
6463 * @len: frame length in bytes
6464 */
6465u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6466                              struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6467                              int len);
6468
6469/**
6470 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6471 *
6472 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6473 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6474 *
6475 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6476 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6477 * @len: frame length in bytes
6478 */
6479u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6480                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6481                              int len);
6482
6483#endif /* MAC80211_H */
6484